Yamaha | RX-A1070 | Owner's Manual | Owner`s Manual - Yamaha Corporation

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
Introduction
5
3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................38
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................38
Accessories................................................................................... 5
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................38
About this book ............................................................................ 5
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....39
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................39
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................39
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 Connecting other devices............................................................40
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................40
FEATURES
6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................40
7
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................41
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................42
AV CONTROLLER............................................................................................................................................. 9
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................43
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) .......................................................................................................................... 9
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................45
Application for smartphone / tablets “MusicCast CONTROLLER”............................................................... 9
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................46
Part names and functions .............................................................10
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................47
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 10
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................48
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 12
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................49
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................50
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 15
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................51
Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................51
PREPARATIONS
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................52
16
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................57
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................59
General setup procedure ..............................................................16
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................59
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................17
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................59
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 18
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 26
PLAYBACK
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................32
60
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 32
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 33
Basic playback procedure .............................................................60
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 34
Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................60
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 36
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................61
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 37
En
2
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 62
Playback of Internet radio............................................................................................................................89
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 62
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) .............................................................................91
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................63
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay..................................92
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 64
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ....................................................................................................92
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 67
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ..............94
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 68
Multi-zone configuration examples .............................................................................................................94
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 68
Preparing Zone2 ...........................................................................................................................................95
Listening to FM/AM radio
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................69
Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 100
Controlling Zone2 .........................................................................................................................................98
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................100
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 69
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................100
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 69
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 101
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 70
Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................102
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 71
Control screen.............................................................................................................................................102
Listening to DAB radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................72
Settings screen............................................................................................................................................103
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 104
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 72
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................104
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 72
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................105
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 73
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 106
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 74
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 74
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................106
Listening to FM radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................76
CONFIGURATIONS
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 76
111
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 76
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 78
Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 111
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 79
Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................111
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................80
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 113
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 80
Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................113
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 81
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) ................................................................. 116
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................82
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 82
DSP Program menu items ..........................................................................................................................117
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 82
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 119
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ...................85
Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................120
Media sharing setup..................................................................................................................................... 85
Speaker (Manual Setup) .............................................................................................................................123
Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................... 86
Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................127
Listening to Internet radio ............................................................89
En
Video............................................................................................................................................................129
3
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................155
HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 130
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 131
USB and network ........................................................................................................................................156
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 133
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 158
Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 134
Glossary .................................................................................... 159
Function...................................................................................................................................................... 137
Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................159
ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 139
Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................161
Language .................................................................................................................................................... 140
HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................161
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ............... 140
Network information ..................................................................................................................................162
Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 141
Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................162
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 142
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 163
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 143
Supported devices......................................................................................................................................163
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 143
File formats .................................................................................................................................................163
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 143
Video signal flow........................................................................ 164
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 144
Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................164
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 144
Multi-zone output .......................................................................................................................................165
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 144
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 144
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 165
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 145
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................165
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 145
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................167
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 145
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................167
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 146
Trademarks............................................................................... 168
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 146
Specifications............................................................................ 169
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 146
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 148
APPENDIX
149
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 149
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 150
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 150
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 150
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 151
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 153
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)..... 154
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ................................................................... 154
En
4
Introduction
Accessories
About this book
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
# AM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A.
model, unless otherwise specified.
# DAB/FM antenna
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
# YPAO microphone
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
# Power cable
X
# Remote control
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
# Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
# CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
En
5
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
En
6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.65)
Various wireless connection
methods (p.51)
Connecting various devices (p.32)
By processing front left and front right sound fields
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
camcorders, and other devices.
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
without router.
dynamic sound effects.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.32)
Surround playback with 5 speakers
placed in front (p.66)
PL
Presence L
Sound field
PR
Presence R
Sound field
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place
them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the
front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.59)
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from external
device
SL
Surround L
Sound field
SR
Surround R
Sound field
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Image of sound field processing
Low power consumption (p.140)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
power consumption.
En
7
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
using CINEMA DSP.
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
Capability for reproducing reflections
Level
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En
8
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with
MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
cable connections between AV receiver and source devices
link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you
compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
through the various settings such as speaker connections,
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
commands and playback source.
TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the
other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
speaker system.
select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
Functions
MusicCast compatible devices.
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
Functions
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
Functions
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance
• Selecting and playing back various content
• Playback control (including music selection for some
with illustrations)
– Play back music from your mobile device
• Viewing owner’s manual
– Select an Internet radio station
X
X
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
Play.
Play.
sources)
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En
9
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a
b
c
d
e
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
f
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.130)
VOLUME
g
h
f INPUT knob
Opening the front panel door
Selects an input source.
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
g Front panel door
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).
h VOLUME knob
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
Adjusts the volume.
• Standby Through is enabled (p.131)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.132)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.133)
c Front display
Displays information (p.12).
d Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
e PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.68).
En
10
■ Inside of the front panel door
a
b
cd e
ON SCREEN
OPTION
fg
h
ij
SCENE
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1
2
3
kl
m
INFO(WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
n
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
o
a ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).
d DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).
e TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of
output sounds (p.107).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.67).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.59).
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
p
q
L
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
r
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.61).
i MULTI ZONE keys
(U.S.A. model)
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.69).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.72, p.69).
ZONE 2: Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.98).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is
controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.98).
j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.53).
k MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.70, p.73,
p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).
g PROGRAM keys
m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.73, p.77) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70)
(other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.100).
n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.69).
o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.82).
p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.43).
q PHONES jack
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.63).
For connecting headphones.
r VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
(p.37).
En
11
Front display (indicators)
a bc
de
h
g
f
j
i
k
ECO
VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.
ZONE
PARTY
2
IN OUT 1 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
lmn
o
p
q r
a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.140).
c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.147)
d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
e ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.98).
f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
station signal (other models).
g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.99).
FPL L C R FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
rs
h Information display
t
u
s VIRTUAL
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.104).
i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.64), or the virtual surround
processing (p.66) is working.
t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.107) is working.
l Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.51).
m Bluetooth indicator
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.80).
n Hi-Res
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.109) is working.
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.
p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) is working.
q SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
r Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
En
N Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
o CINEMA DSP indicator
12
u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.107).
Rear panel
a
b
c
d
e
f
(HDCP2.2)
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
h
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
2
g
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
i
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
j k
l
m
( 3 NET )
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
PR
PB
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
L
(SINGLE)
1
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2
n
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
o
p
(U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
En
13
q
a PHONO jacks
q PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.36).
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.23) or to an external power amplifier (p.31).
b AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.36).
c AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
d HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.32). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.33), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.96).
e COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.34).
f HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
g TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.40).
h REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.96).
i NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.39).
j Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.51) and a Bluetooth connection (p.80).
k RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
l VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.40).
m AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.40).
n ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.38).
o ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.95).
p SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.17).
En
14
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter
a
Transmits infrared signals.
b z (receiver power) key
b
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
AV
c
d
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
c Input selection keys
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
o
p
SCENE
e
1
2
f
PROGRAM
g
TOP MENU
h
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
r
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
i
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
d MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the
remote control (p.98).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
t
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.69).
BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).
PRESET: Select a preset station.
TUNING: Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI
Control-compatible playback device (p.165).
k Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.63).
l INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).
m SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
n Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
e SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.61).
BAND
k
l
m
n
s
ENTER
RETURN
j
q
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1-3: AUDIO 1-3 jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks
TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source)
j Radio keys
f PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen
page, the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings
(p.137).
g External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device
(p.165).
h ON SCREEN key
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.70, p.73, p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).
o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.60).
p PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).
q VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
r MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
i Menu operation keys
s OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).
Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
t DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).
X
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
(U.S.A. model)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
En
15
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.17)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.32)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.38)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.39)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.43)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.59)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
16
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.26).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.23).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
9
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
2
3
Speaker type
R
Function
Front (L/R)
12
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
45
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
67
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
ER
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
9
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
X
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However,
the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce
4
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.64).
5
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
10°~30°
10°~30°
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
6
7
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
En
17
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room
7.1/5.1.2 system [S]
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
X
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
layout” (p.22).
X
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.64).
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.42).
En
18
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)
7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).
En
19
5.1 system
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
1
2
4
9
5
3
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.42).
En
20
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)
2.1 system
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
E
R
1
9
2
3
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).
En
21
Presence speaker layout
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and
Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
X
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
Front Height
Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position,
or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Caution
Y
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.22).
En
22
■ Setting the speaker impedance
■ Connecting speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
2
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
strands into the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
or the speakers.
MAIN ZONE z
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
STRAIGHT
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
4
5
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit's metal parts
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
(rear panel and screws).
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker cables short circuit.
En
23
Connection diagram
Speakers to be connected
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Speaker type
7.1/5.1.2
5.1
Front (L/R) 1 2
(
(
Center 3
(
(
Surround (L/R) 4 5
(
)*3
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(SINGLE)
1
2.1
2
The unit (rear)
ZONE 2
(
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
Surround back (L/R) 6 7
)*1
Front presence (L/R) E R
)*2
)*4
(
(
Subwoofer 9
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
(
If you have nine speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and front
E
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
R
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
1
2
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence
speakers (*2).
9
3
9
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers
(*4).
X
4
5
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
6
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.123) to “Basic” (default).
7
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.31).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
+
–
Y
+
–
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
En
24
Connecting speaker cables
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
Audio pin cable
confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
PRE
OUT
(SING
LE)
1
(FR
ONT)
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BACK
SUBW
OOFE
R
2
3
Loosen the speaker terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
SURR
OUN
+
2
3
FR
ON
T
1
4
– (black)
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
1
Tighten the speaker terminal.
2
Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
1
+
ER
L
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
+ (red)
CENT
D BA
CK
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
2
En
25
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.18), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Bi-amp connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
Power-amp channel expansion
(Example)
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
En
26
■ Available speaker configurations
7.1 +1Zone
Main zone
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
7
7
5
)
7
)
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.123)
Page
Surround back
+1 (Zone2)
7.1 +1Zone
27
Front presence
+1 (Zone2)
5.1.2 +1Zone
28
5.1 Bi-Amp
28
7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]
29
Surround
back/ Front
presence
Surround back
External power
amplifier
(required)
Surround back
1
9
2
1
2
9
3
5
4
Y
6
When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”
7
menu (p.42).
Zone2
Main zone
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP1
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En
27
5.1.2 +1Zone
5.1 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp
E
R
1
9
2
3
1
2
1
9
4
9
5
4
2
3
9
5
Zone2
Main zone
Speaker
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
67
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP1
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP2
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the front presence speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En
28
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]
Bi-amp
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
1
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu
2
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).
3
9
9
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
SINGLE
4
5
6
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
7
1
2
via external amp
3
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
9
4
5
X
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En
29
■ Connecting Zone2 speakers
(when using front presence speakers in the main zone)
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP1 or EXTRA SP2 terminals.
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
X
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.95).
(when using surround back speakers in the main zone)
E
The unit (rear)
R
SURROUND
L
EXTRA SP1
R
F.PRESENCE
L
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
2
FL
FR
L
9
SINGLE
ZONE 2
R
1
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK
3
9
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
4
5
Zone2
1
9
2
3
FL
FR
Main zone
9
4
5
6
7
Zone2
Main zone
En
30
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
(Example)
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
V2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
AV 7
Main input jack
TRIGGER
OUT
NT VIDEO
PB
Caution
PR
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
IN
RS-232C
MAIN IN
OUT
PR
2
PR
PB
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
1
L
L
2
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
SPEAKERS
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
ROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
FRONT
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.
R
R
FRONT
L
SUR
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
B
Y
PR
PB
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(SINGLE)
1
2
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
ZONE 2
a bc
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
d
a FRONT jacks
About external power amplifiers
Output front channel sounds.
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
b SURROUND jacks
• With unbalanced inputs
Output surround channel sounds.
c SUR. BACK jacks
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
d CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En
31
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.82).
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
AV 1
Component video cable
HDMI cable
O
T VIDE
ONEN
COMVP 1
PB
A
Y
PR
A
COAXIAL jacks
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
AV 1
Video pin cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3
En
32
Stereo pin cable
Connecting a TV
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
■ HDMI connection
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with
cable).
an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the
Y
remote control (p.60).
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.33).
HDMI
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
(HDCP2.2)
2
The unit
(rear)
1
(ZONE OUT)
1
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
TV
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
(HDCP2.2)
2
HDMI OUT
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 4
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PB
A
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI input
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PR
HDMI
VIDEO
PB
PR
PB
PR
VIDEO
B
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
PHONO
PR
PB
AV 2
HDMI
ZONE OUT
L
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
R
AV 2
ZONE OUT
L
R
HDMI
R
R
AUDIO 1
AUDIO
(2 TV)
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
L
L
R
R
R
HDMI input
FRONT
SURROUND
HDMI
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
(4 RADIO)
FM
2 OPTICAL
L
L
ANTENNA
75ȍ
1 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
FM
AM
AM
R
TV
1 OPTICAL
Projector
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
TV (already connected)
O
Y
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
X
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.96).
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.165).
En
33
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
output jacks available on your video device.
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Y
Video
Audio
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Component video
(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
X
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.
Y
The unit (rear)
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
PR
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
■ HDMI connection
PB
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
TRIGG
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
1
VIDEO
PR
Y
PB
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
Video output
(component video)
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
2
B
PHONO
L
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
L
R
PR
PB
(SINGLE)
1
R
2
PR
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
I OUT
CP2.2)
1
ARC
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
GND
NE
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
R
(1 BD/DVD)
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
Y
PB
PR
CENTER
SPEAKERS
AV 7
L
R
PB
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENC
Y
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
1
75ȍ
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
FM
AM
SINGLE
HDMI output
OUT
2
B
Y
PR
PB
AV 2
C
HDMI
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(SINGLE)
C
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AM
1
COAXIAL
HDMI
2
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
L
HDMI
CENTER
Video device
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
L
L
R
R
R
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
Video device
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Audio output
(digital or analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
En
34
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
AV 1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 3
(1 BD/DVD
AV 4
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
COM
Y
AV
A
Video output
(composite video)
VIDEO
V
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
R
AV
ZON
L
VIDEO
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
V
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM
AM
C
C
COAXIAL
O
Video device
O
L
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En
35
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
PHONO
L
L
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
Y
L
L
R
R
R
R
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks
Ground lead
GND
GND
to another input source.
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
X
AV 2
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
AV 1
A
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
PR
Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 2
PB
PR
ZONE OUT
L
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
Digital optical
PB
B
R
Digital coaxial
FRONT
SURROUND
Turntable (PHONO)
L
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
75ȍ
FM
AM
C
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
C
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
O
Analog stereo
Turntable
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.
Audio output jacks on audio device
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1-4 (AUDIO)
The unit
(rear)
AUDIO 1-3 (AUDIO)
Audio device
O
L
L
L
R
R
PHONO
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En
36
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
■ Analog stereo connection
Connect an audio playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
ENTER
Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage
ZONE 2
RETURN
device” (p.82).
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
L
unit.
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
R
The unit (front)
■ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
HDMI
Audio device
The unit (front)
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.
Game console
X
• If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs
audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit
Camcorder
outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
En
37
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down
Insert
Release
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
X
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
FM antenna
AM antenna
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
(HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PB
A
PR
1
DAB/FM antenna
R
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
2
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
L
R
PR
PB
AV 2
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
1
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
The unit (rear)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM
AV 1
AM
(1 BD/DVD)
SINGLE
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
1
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
2
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
B
PHONO
L
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
ZONE OUT
L
R
PR
PB
AV 2
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
1
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
Assembling the AM antenna
SURROUND
L
EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
DAB/FM
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
(4 RADIO)
7575ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En
38
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
Y
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
software or firewall settings appropriately.
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.51).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
Router
The unit (rear)
NETWORK
AV 6
( 3 NET )
AV 7
AC IN
Mobile device
TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
REMOTE
IN
RS-232C
Y
OUT
2
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.131).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.
En
39
5 Connecting other devices
6 Connecting the power cable
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a
The unit (rear)
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 7
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug
AC IN
GGER
OUT
REMOTE
cable.
.1A
TAL
IN
RS-232C
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V240V
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
REMOTE
IN
OUT
2
ROUND
SUR. BACK
SP1
NCE
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
RS-232C
2
-AMP
1
System connector
jack
2
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
SPEAKERS
R
L
( 3 NET )
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
1
(SINGLE)
ERS
1
TRIGGER
OUT
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
E OUT
110V120V
TRIGGER
OUT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
to an AC wall outlet.
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
NETWORK
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
( 3 NET )
AC IN
OTE
RS-232C
To an AC wall outlet
OUT
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.138) in the “Setup”
menu.
CENTER
En
40
R
FRONT
L
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
2
AUDIO
TUNER
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default),
2
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
SCENE
1
5
4
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
PRESET
MOVIE
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
X
BAND
MODE
TUNING
6
7
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
En
41
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
z
AV
1
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
6
manually before performing YPAO.
5
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• When using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, select “Power
Amp Assign” (p.123), then select your speaker system.
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.26)
AUDIO
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !
CINEMA FRONT) (p.20)
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
“Surround” (p.124), then select “Front”.
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.22)
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
4
1
2
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
Presence” (p.125), then select your front presence speaker
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
4
5
layout.
7
X
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
then “Manual Setup”.
En
42
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
ZONE 2
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
X
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
SCENE
1
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.
MAIN
4
4
YPAO MIC
jack
for acoustic perfection.
Y
VOLUME
YPAO MIC
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
TOP MENU
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
OPTION
1
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
ENTER
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
RETURN
DISPLAY
The unit (front)
RETURN
9
– Do not connect headphones.
2
3
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
YPAO
5
microphone
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
Ear height
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
The following screen appears on the TV.
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En
43
5
If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single).
1
Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
a
d
e
bac
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
Settings
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening positions
or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take
measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room.
The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
b
c a e
d
c
a b
d
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for
you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the
measurement.
listening position you will be seated most frequently.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.45)
En
44
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
AV
1
3
measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
MAIN
ZONE 2
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
SCENE
1
2
3
start the measurement immediately.
4
X
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
X
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
finishes.
4
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
“Error messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).
X
X
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
sounds even at low volume.
the measurement results” (p.47).
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the
2
“Option” menu.
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
5
ENTER.
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En
45
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
3
When the measurements at the positions you want to
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
positions.
following screen appears automatically.
Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error
MAIN
ZONE 2
messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
1
4
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
VOLUME
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
TOP MENU
start the measurement immediately.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.47).
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
the first position finishes.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
X
X
4
PRESET
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
5
4
To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
En
46
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
“Result” and press ENTER.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
X
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu,
MAIN
ZONE 2
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
X
PROGRAM
MUTE
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
VOLUME
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
TOP MENU
a
sounds even at low volume.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
b
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the
OPTION
“Option” menu.
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
7
c
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
a Measurement result items
BAND
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
b Measurement result details
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
4
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Size
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
3
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
En
47
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
and then “Result” (p.119).
2
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
4
En
48
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1: No Front SP
Front speakers are not detected.
E-2: No Sur. SP
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers
are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
En
49
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.47) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.47) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.47) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
En
50
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to control the unit
Selecting the connection method
from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
unit.
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless
Internet
Direct)” (p.57).
Wireless router
Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.39) or the wireless
network connection (p.52).
Modem
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.52).
Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.57).
En
51
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59)
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Select a connection method according to your environment.
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.52)
ZONE 2
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
SCENE
1
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.53)
• Using other connection methods (p.54)
MAIN
4
5
6
3
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
4
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
ON SCREEN
wireless router.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.
X
BAND
– Network settings
MODE
TUNING
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
PRESET
– Bluetooth settings
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
8
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
4
– Account information for the network services
7
8
MEMORY
ENT
X
3
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share
Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Press ON SCREEN.
En
52
9
After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
z
AV
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.
Y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
10 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
VOLUME
the Wi-Fi screen.
TOP MENU
OPTION
RETURN
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
DISPLAY
connection method.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
point).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
The name of the unit
11 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
En
53
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
z
5
2
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
2
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
3
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
Y
4
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
MUSIC
3
4
5
6
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
3
4
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.52).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.55).
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
The following connection methods are available.
unit via HDMI.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
SCENE
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
wireless network settings.
AV
1
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
8
7
Manual Setting
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
PIN Code
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En
54
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.55).
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.56).
Searching for an access point
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
access points appears on the TV screen.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
1
AUDIO
1
Setting up the wireless connection manually
security key for your network.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
1
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
2
SCENE
1
2
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
2
DISPLAY
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
BAND
MODE
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
55
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
and select “NEXT”.
5
access points appears on the TV screen.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
AV
1
Using the PIN code
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
hexadecimal digits.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
2
64 hexadecimal digits.
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
4
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
wireless router (access point).
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
3
ON SCREEN
OPTION
press ENTER to start the connection process.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
4
the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
press ENTER to start the connection process.
PRESET
connection method.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
the TV screen.
3
4
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
56
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
Direct” and select “OK”.
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
AUDIO
TUNER
7
Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected
MAIN
ZONE 2
to the unit without permission.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
1
2
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Y
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
X
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
unit via HDMI.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
3
4
5
6
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
Connection” and press ENTER.
Y
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.
En
57
9
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
and select “NEXT”.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed
instruction manual of the mobile device.
to Step 10.
1
Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
2
Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
AUDIO
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
access points.
MAIN
ZONE 2
3
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
4
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a
mobile device.
En
58
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
z
AV
1
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
5
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
2
3
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
X
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
4
room and play them back simultaneously.
MUTE
3
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
products, visit the Yamaha website.
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PROGRAM
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
SCENE
1
1
2
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
OPTION
MusicCast CONTROLLER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
CONNECT
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
4
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
5
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit's wireless settings at once.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.133) in the
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
En
59
“Setup” menu.
PLAYBACK
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Basic playback procedure
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Input selection keys
1
On-screen input selection
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
a Press ON SCREEN.
player) connected to the unit.
MAIN
ZONE 2
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
MUTE
VOLUME
2
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
ENTER.
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
OPTION
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
pages.
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.
Russia models) (p.69)
MODE
TUNING
1
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
DISPLAY
BAND
PRESET
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2
only) (p.72)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.76)
OUT 1+2
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)
Off
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.61).
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
X
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL
on the front panel (p.107).
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (p.136), you can turn on/off each zone by
pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
En
60
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1
SCENE (SCENE key)
SCENE
HDMI Output
4
Input (p.60)
AV 1
AUDIO 1
NET RADIO
TUNER
Audio Select (p.109)
Auto
Auto
-
-
HDMI Output (p.60)
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
DSP Program (p.63)
Sci-Fi
STRAIGHT
7ch Stereo
7ch Stereo
Input
ON SCREEN
3
2
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Pure Direct Mode (p.128)
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Enhancer (p.68)
Off
On
On
On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.109)
On
On
On
On
Mode
DISPLAY
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
X
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.113).
3
4
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.
En
61
Registering a scene
1
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
2
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
VOLUME
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
assignments in “Detail” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,
Subwoofer Trim
Video
Video Mode
X
Volume
Master Volume
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
HDMI OUT
4
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display.
SCENE1
SET Complete
SCENE
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
AUDIO
1
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
SCENE
VOL.
L C R
SL
SW
SR
SBL
SBR
connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
type in “Device Control” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
• (China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the
ENTER
unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to
RETURN
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
En
When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
assigned.
“Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
BAND
MOVIE
X
62
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
and press ENTER.
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
HDMI OUT
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.64).
SCENE
1
2
3
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
AUDIO
1
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
X
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
4
PROGRAM.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
PROGRAM
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“DSP Program” menu (p.116).
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
music sources or stereo playback (p.65).
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
DISPLAY
BAND
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
MODE
TUNING
the “Information” menu (p.140).
Selecting a surround decoder
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
2-channel sources (p.67).
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
Switching to the straight decode mode
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.
(p.67).
Switching to the Pure Direct mode
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
• Press PURE DIRECT.
• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.68).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.68).
En
63
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
Enhanced
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category
MUSIC
HD 3
CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
FPL L C R FPR
SL
SW
SR
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program
X
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields.
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the
rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
64
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
En
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
65
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
STEREO
can place them in the front (p.20) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Y
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.66) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected.
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.
En
66
Enjoying unprocessed playback
1
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
AUDIO
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
1
VOLUME
Press STRAIGHT.
bDsur
Neural:X
Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
or disabled.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
STRAIGHT
ENTER
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
RETURN
DISPLAY
Y
BAND
MODE
TUNING
SUR.DECODE
PRESET
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.67).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.66) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
played.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
TOP MENU
SL
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
4
VOL.
Auto
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
SCENE
1
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Y
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby
X
Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
• When the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.
the selected decode type (p.117).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.159).
En
67
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
quality.
1
2
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
4
PURE DIRECT
PROGRAM
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
SCENE
1
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
R
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.109) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
Y
POP-UP/MENU
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
OPTION
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
ENTER
modes.
VOL.
L
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
1
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
RETURN
TUNING
enabled or disabled.
DISPLAY
– Using the multi-zone function
BAND
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
MODE
Press ENHANCER.
Enhancer On
PRESET
Hi-Res ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
“ENHANCER” lights up
PURE DIRECT
3
4
ENHANCER
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.109) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
En
68
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
1
2
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
Y
1
2
3
PHONO
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
5
AUDIO
TUNER
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in
U.S.A. model.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
2
MUTE
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
FM 87.50MHz
3
VOLUME
about a second to search stations automatically.
for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to
OPTION
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
1
2
3
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
Set the unit to standby mode.
FM 98.50MHz
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z
4
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
MAIN ZONE z.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
VOL.
4
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
TOP MENU
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
antennas.
3
Setting the frequency steps
PROGRAM
1
2
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
Selecting a frequency for reception
from registered radio stations.
AV
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
STRAIGHT
Y
Numeric keys
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
X
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
PROGRAM
3
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
4
5
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and
turn it on again.
En
69
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
AV
1
2
5
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
TUNER
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
X
station.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
“Auto Preset” (p.79).
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
SCENE
1
2
3
Preset
4
■ Registering a radio station
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
SL
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Y
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.69) to
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
tune into the desired radio station.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
ENTER
RETURN
2
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
X
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
VOLUME
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
Preset number
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
En
70
Operating the radio on the TV
■ Browse screen
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
a
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
c
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
b
■ Playback screen
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
b
a
4
a Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor key (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
c
VOLUME
b Preset number
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(FM/AM) and frequency.
Menu
MODE
TUNING
b TUNED/STEREO indicators
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Utility
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
1 Page Up
Function
Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
1 Page Down
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the Menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the Menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
En
71
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models only)
AV
1
5
2
3
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
DAB
X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
transmission method.
PARTY
ZONE 2
1
2
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.74).
HDMI OUT
Y
SCENE
3
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.106) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
4
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
PROGRAM
MUTE
be cleared.
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
VOLUME
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
TUNER
VOL.
SL
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
AUDIO
MAIN
BBC Radio 4
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
4
1
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
TOP MENU
X
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.38).
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
scan.
Preparing the DAB tuning
DISPLAY
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
perform an initial scan.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
1
2
3
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
DAB
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.
Init Scan
Press [ENTER]
3
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Y
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
VOL.
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
Secondary station
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
Init Scan
>>>------- 30%
BBC Radio 4
Daily Service
DAB 2
VOL.
BBC National
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.110) in the “Option” menu.
En
72
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
AV
1
2
5
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
AUDIO
TUNER
X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
3
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
4
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
PROGRAM
MUTE
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PRESET:01
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
OPTION
2
RETURN
TUNING
X
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.71).
number.
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
SLEEP
Y
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
PRESET
INFO
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
BAND
BAND
MODE
SL
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
DISPLAY
VOL.
SBL
(p.72) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
ENTER
MOVIE
1
2
3
VOLUME
1
TOP MENU
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
station.
SCENE
1
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
4
Preset number
MEMORY
Preset
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Preset
02:Empty
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
En
73
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
into a DAB radio station.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
TUNER
1
2
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Info
Program Type
4
RETURN
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
VOL.
Item name
POP-UP/MENU
OPTION
100 [best]).
Press INFO.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
SCENE
displayed item appears.
DAB
DISPLAY
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
Classic FM
Classic Music
1
2
3
4
5
BAND
TUNING
VOL.
SL
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
DAB channel label
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
3
Press OPTION.
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Information
PRESET
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
channel label.
BAND
MODE
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
4
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
En
74
6
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Reception strength
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency
Channel label
Frequency
Channel label
174.928 MHz
5A
225.648 MHz
12B
176.640 MHz
5B
227.360 MHz
12C
178.352 MHz
5C
229.072 MHz
12D
180.064 MHz
5D
230.784 MHz
13A
181.936 MHz
6A
232.496 MHz
13B
183.648 MHz
6B
234.208 MHz
13C
185.360 MHz
6C
235.776 MHz
13D
187.072 MHz
6D
237.488 MHz
13E
188.928 MHz
7A
239.200 MHz
13F
190.640 MHz
7B
192.352 MHz
7C
194.064 MHz
7D
195.936 MHz
8A
197.648 MHz
8B
199.360 MHz
8C
201.072 MHz
8D
202.928 MHz
9A
204.640 MHz
9B
206.352 MHz
9C
208.064 MHz
9D
209.936 MHz
10A
211.648 MHz
10B
213.360 MHz
10C
215.072 MHz
10D
216.928 MHz
11A
218.640 MHz
11B
220.352 MHz
11C
222.064 MHz
11D
223.936 MHz
12A
En
75
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
from registered radio stations.
AV
1
5
2
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Y
AUDIO
TUNER
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
antennas.
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
MAIN
ZONE 2
Selecting a frequency for reception
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
1
2
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
“Auto Preset” (p.79).
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
■ Registering a radio station
Press BAND to select the FM band.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
FM 87.50MHz
OPTION
VOL.
1
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
BAND
TUNING
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.76) to
tune into the desired radio station.
DISPLAY
MODE
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
4
3
PRESET
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
PRESET
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
TUNING
about a second to search stations automatically.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Numeric keys
MEMORY
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
FM 98.50MHz
number.
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
Preset number
SBL
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
Preset
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
X
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
Preset
STEREO TUNED
En
76
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
AV
1
5
2
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
TUNER
1
2
3
2
3
Press BAND to select the FM band
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
SCENE
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
4
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM
MUTE
Preset
VOLUME
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
SL
TOP MENU
ON
SCREEN
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
POP-UP/MENU
Y
OPTION
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
ENTER
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN
DISPLAY
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
4
Numeric keys
En
77
Radio Data System tuning
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and
DSP Program
Sound mode name
“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
3
PHONO
many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System
AUDIO
1
2
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
station.
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
VOLUME
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting
station.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Y
X
OPTION
ENTER
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.79).
RETURN
DISPLAY
2
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
STEREO TUNED
Info
Program Type
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
Information
En
78
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Operating the radio on the TV
■ Browse screen
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
a
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
c
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
b
■ Playback screen
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
b
a
4
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
仮画面
VOLUME
a Preset station list
c
b Preset number
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
a Radio station information
Menu
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(DAB/FM) and frequency.
MODE
TUNING
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.78), the Radio
Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
Utility
b TUNED/STEREO indicators
Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
1 Page Up
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
En
79
Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the
AV
1
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
5
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
BLUETOOTH
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
The unit
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
VOLUME
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
2
OPTION
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.
ENTER
RETURN
The unit
DISPLAY
Bluetooth speakers/
headphones
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
Y
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
displayed on the TV.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.39).
X
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
(p.163).
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
En
80
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio
AUDIO
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
AV
1
4
Input selection keys
played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
MAIN
ZONE 2
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
2
3
Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to
X
select an input source.
The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.
5
Press ON SCREEN.
While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” !
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
“OK”.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the
unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.
En
81
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Playback of USB storage device contents
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32
AV
USB
format).
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
X
and start playback.
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
MAIN
ZONE 2
Connecting a USB storage device
SCENE
1
2
3
4
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ON
SCREEN
ENTER
OPTION
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
ENTER
USB
5V
RETURN
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
X
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
displayed.
3
4
USB storage device
USB
Connected
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this
case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
En
82
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
■ Browse screen
a
b
c
e
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
d
MAIN
ZONE 2
a Status indicators
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
X
b List name
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
c Contents list
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
OPTION
ENTER
hold down RETURN.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
d Item number/total
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
e Operation menu
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
MUSIC
Menu
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
En
83
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
■ Playback screen
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
a
b
device contents.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
c
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
PROGRAM
MUTE
X
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
4
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
b Playback information
VOLUME
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
a Status indicators
3
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
SCENE
1
1
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
TOP MENU
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
c Operation menu
3
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Item
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Function
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
X
Repeat
(Repeat)
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
4
En
84
Function
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Media sharing setup
Y
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.39). You can check whether
the media sharing setting on each music server.
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”
(p.131) in the “Information” menu.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
X
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
1
2
3
4
5
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
settings.
En
85
Playback of PC music contents
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
playback.
displayed.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
X
VOLUME
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
during playback, playback stops automatically.
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
MODE
TUNING
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
X
BAND
PRESET
playback screen is displayed.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
2
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
En
86
■ Browse screen
a
b
c
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
■ Playback screen
a
b
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
d
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
SCENE
1
4
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
b Playback information
b List name
VOLUME
c Contents list
TOP MENU
c
e
AUDIO
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
Menu
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Function
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
X
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
En
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.112).
87
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
2
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
AUDIO
X
4
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
3
Item
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
PRESET
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Repeat
(Repeat)
4
Function
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
88
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.39). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Playback of Internet radio
Y
AV
NET
1
source.
the unit in “Network” (p.131) in the “Information” menu.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
SCENE
1
2
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
3
4
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
2
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
BAND
PRESET
playback screen is displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
En
89
■ Browse screen
a
b
c
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
■ Playback screen
a
b
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
d
SCENE
1
2
3
4
a Playback indicator
a Playback indicator
b List name
b Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
e Operation menu
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
d Item number/total
OPTION
ENTER
c
e
AUDIO
1
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Add to favorites
Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.91).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
BAND
Menu
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Add to favorites
(Remove from
favorites)
Function
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the
“Favorites” folder (p.91).
4
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
X
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
En
90
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
screen.
X
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.100).
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
VOLUME
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
press ENTER.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Browse screen
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
En
91
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
(wired or wireless)
1
Router
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
The unit
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)
(wired or wireless)
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
iOS 10 (example)
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
Y
2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
“Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
3
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
Select a song and start playback.
X
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.103).
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.132) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.133) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.112) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
En
92
■ Playback screen
a
b
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
c
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
a Playback indicator
SCENE
1
2
3
4
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.
PROGRAM
MUTE
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
VOLUME
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Menu
Screen Off
Function
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
4
En
93
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
■ Enjoying videos/music in another room
unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to
the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).
Video (HDMI)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
Guest room
(Zone2)
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Enjoying music in another room
Living room (main zone)
Connections
TV: p.96
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Study room
(Zone2)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30
Study room
(Zone2)
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.96
En
94
Preparing Zone2
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Caution
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.30).
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect
speakers to the external amplifier.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
ZONE OUT (ZONE2) jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
PB
A
PR
ZONE OUT
VIDEO
B
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
PR
PB
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
L
(SINGLE)
L
R
R
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
R
FRONT
SURROUND
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
SUB
EXTRA S
SURROUND
ZONE 2
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM
AM
ZONE
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
L
R
AUDIO
Zone2
Main zone
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with volume control,
set “Volume” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En
95
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2.
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
Y
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with
an HDMI cable (p.34).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied
with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
IN/OUT jacks.
AV 1
2(1 B
(HDCP2.2)
X
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
Y
HDMI
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
VIDEO
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
L
device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZO
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM
AM
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(Example: using a TV)
(HDCP2.2)
2
HDMI input
AV 2
DVD)
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWO
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
Y
AV 2
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
1
IN
OUT
2
IN
B
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(SINGLE)
REMOTE
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
HDMI
OUT
1
HDMI
2
AXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
TENNA
RADIO)
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
External device
(such as a CD player)
Main zone
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the
“Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
X
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the
Zone2
HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
Main zone
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.30).
En
96
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
Remote control
Zone2
En
97
Controlling Zone2
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
3
PHONO
AUDIO
1
2
Input selection keys
1
2
4
station.
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Press z (receiver power).
pages.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
TUNER
USB
BLUETOOTH
NET
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
MAIN/ZONE2
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Y
output” (p.165).
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
OPTION
ENTER
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)
BAND
Y
PRESET
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
web control (p.101) to control Zone2.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
only) (p.76)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)
DISPLAY
TUNING
only) (p.72)
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
MODE
MOVIE
Russia models) (p.69)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
“SERVER”.
RETURN
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect
the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone
ON
SCREEN
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main
4
zone.
X
• The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2
input with the web control (p.101) or AV CONTROLLER (p.9).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input
or use the party mode (p.99).
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
En
98
■ Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Adjusting the volume
being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
party.
Press SCENE.
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
PARTY
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
SCENE
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
MUTE
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
1
X
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
display.
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
Y
off).
If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.136) in the “Setup”
menu to “Enable” (default).
ENTER
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
RETURN
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
DISPLAY
Press ENHANCER.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Press PARTY.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
En
99
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
1
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
shortcut numbers.
5
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE 2
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
X
AUDIO
MAIN
Recalling a registered item
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
AV
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.91).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
1
2
2
3
4
Registering an item
PROGRAM
MUTE
Recall Preset
01:USB
VOLUME
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
TOP MENU
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.
SCENE
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1
2
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
Memory Preset
01:Empty
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
Memory Preset
02:Empty
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59) on your mobile device.
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
Y
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
VOL.
X
MEMORY
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
Shortcut number (flashes)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Numeric keys
SL
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
Press MEMORY.
DISPLAY
MOVIE
VOL.
100
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
X
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.
Web browser
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.103) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.
Web control
Web control
• If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.132), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction
(wired or wireless)
PC
manual.
(wired or wireless)
Router
The unit
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,
Y
iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.9).
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.103) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 11.x
– Safari 9.x
1
2
Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
En
101
Top menu screen
Control screen
c
a
e
a
f
b
c
d
d
e
g
b
f
a PLAY INFO
a CONTROL
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
b TOP MENU
b STATUS
Moves to the top menu screen.
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
c SCENE
c SETTINGS
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
Moves to the settings screen.
d POWER
d PARTY MODE
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).
e VOLUME
e SYSTEM POWER
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
f MAIN VOLUME
f RELOAD
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
for volume adjustment.
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Y
g RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
En
102
Settings screen
Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.
b BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
c RELOAD
a
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
b
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.
c
a Rename
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133) or the name of each zone (p.134). Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
Network
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
Selects the network connection method (p.131) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.131). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.92). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.132) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.132).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En
103
Viewing the current status
AV
1
5
2
3
6
AV 1-7
selected) on the front panel display or TV.
VIDEO AUX
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO 1-3
Switching information on the front display
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various
TUNER (FM/AM)
Info
Audio Decoder
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
TUNER (DAB)
Item name
POP-UP/MENU
OPTION
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
RETURN
AV1
†‡ Dsur
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Bluetooth
USB
information appears.
ENTER
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
SBL
SERVER
AirPlay
Information
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
3
4
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.78).
4
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)
display items.
SCENE
1
Item
PHONO
AUDIO
ZONE 2
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently
4
1
MAIN
Currently input
source
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.74) for details.
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
also be applied separately to each input source.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder
is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
104
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Input source/
Party mode status
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Press DISPLAY.
Compressed Music
Enhancer status
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound mode
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Audio format/
Decoder
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
DISPLAY
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
En
105
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is
Option menu items
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
X
during playback.
1
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Front display
Option
Tone Control
• Default settings are underlined.
Item
VOL.
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBR
TV screen
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
Dialogue
(Dialog)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
X
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
En
106
Page
107
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
107
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
107
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
108
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
108
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
108
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
108
Lipsync Adjustment
(Lipsync Adj.)
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
SBL
Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)
108
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
108
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
109
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
109
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
109
Item
Function
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
109
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
audio connection is made for one input source.
109
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
110
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
110
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88).
-
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88).
-
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Page
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings
72
74
Off (Off)
Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)
Enables YPAO Volume.
X
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.43).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Settings
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Y
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
volume.
X
Output level
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
On
Off
Input level
En
107
Volume: high
Output level
Volume: low
You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL
On
Off
Input level
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
■ Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
X
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
Setting range
0 to 3
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
X
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
X
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Settings
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.64) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Ideal position
En
108
Off (Off)
Disables Extra Bass.
On (On)
Enables Extra Bass.
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
in “Processing” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Settings
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).
X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Settings
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Configures the input settings.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Others: Off (Off)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
Y
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
– DSD audio
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
source.
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Enables the high-resolution mode.
On (On)
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
Auto (Auto)
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
En
109
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO
AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En
110
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
Input menu items
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Item
The input source of the unit also changes.
X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En
111
Function
Page
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon.
112
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
112
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
112
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
112
■ Rename/Icon Select
■ Decoder Mode
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
X
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS”.
Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.
■ Setup procedure
Input sources
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
1
Settings
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.
X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
input jack is assigned) is selected.
2
Auto
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB
and mute).
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
X
5
6
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Input source
SERVER
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Settings
X
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
X
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.
En
112
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
5
6
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.61) using the TV screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Item
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q).
Function
Page
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
113
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
114
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon.
115
Reset
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
115
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.
X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.62).
X
You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
En
113
■ Load
Check or uncheck
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.
Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Choices
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI
Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.
Input
Input (p.60), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
(p.109)
*1
Only when “TUNER” is selected
*2 Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected
Default
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.60)
SCENE3-12: Off
Mode
DSP Program (p.63), Pure Direct Mode (p.128), Enhancer (p.68), Enhancer Hi-Res
Mode (p.109)
Y
Sound
Tone Control (p.107), YPAO Volume (p.107), Adaptive DRC (p.107), Extra Bass
(p.108)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.128), Dialogue Lift (p.108), Dialogue Level (p.108),
Subwoofer Trim (p.108)
Video
Video Mode (p.129)
Volume
Master Volume (p.60)
To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165).
Detail
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.127), Delay (p.127)
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.123), PEQ Select (p.126)
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
the assignments for SCENE4.
X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.
En
114
■ Rename/Icon Select
Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when
pressing SCENE
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Y
■ Setup procedure
Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.
1
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.
When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.
3
If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.61) for the selected scene.
En
115
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
6
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En
116
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DSP Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
1.0 s to 5.0 s
X
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Reverb Delay
0 ms to 250 ms
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item
Decode Type
Function
Selects a surround decoder to be used in
combination with the selected sound
program.
0% to 100%
Settings
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6
Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to reduce
it.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to
reduce it.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.
En
117
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you select “7ch Stereo”.
Item
Function
Level
Adjusts the entire volume.
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume
balance.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume
balance.
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to
Settings
“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.
-5 to 0 to +5
-5 to 0 to +5
Decode Type
Item
Higher to enhance the front side, and
lower to enhance the rear side.
bDsur
-5 to 0 to +5
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread
the center channel signals
to left and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field.
Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.
0 to 5 to 10
Height Balance
Monaural Mix
Higher to enhance the upside, and
Adjust the height volume balance lower to enhance the downside. (The
using the front presence speakers. front presence speakers do not
produce sounds when “Height
Balance” is set to “0”.)
Neo:6 Music
Enables/disables monaural sound
Off, On
output.
X
Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
En
118
Function
Settings
Off, On
Select “On” to spread center channel
signals to left and right if you feel the
center sound is too strong when
2-channel source is played.
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
En
119
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
Auto Setup
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
123
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
123
Configuration
Manual Setup
Lipsync
Sound
Video
43
Setting Pattern
Selects a speaker system.
123
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
124
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
124
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
124
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
124
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
125
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
125
Layout
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
125
Power Amp Assign
Speaker
Page
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
125
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
126
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
126
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
126
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
127
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
127
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
127
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
127
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volumes.
127
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
128
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
128
Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
128
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
128
Virtual Presence Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.
128
Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
128
Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.
128
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
129
En
120
Menu
HDMI
Network
Item
Function
Page
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
130
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
130
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
131
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
131
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
131
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
132
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
132
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
133
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
other devices of the network.
133
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
133
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
80
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
133
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
134
Device Search
Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter.
81
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
134
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
135
Audio Receive
Bluetooth
Audio Send
Main Zone Set
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
135
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
135
Audio Delay
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing.
135
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
135
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.
135
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.
135
Zone2 Set
Multi Zone
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.
136
Balance
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output.
136
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
136
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
136
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
136
Zone Rename
En
121
Menu
Item
Page
137
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
137
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
137
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
137
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
138
Remote PROGRAM Key
Display Set
Function
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Input Assignment
Function
Trigger Output1
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
138
Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
138
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
139
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
139
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
140
Select an on-screen menu language.
140
ECO
Language
En
122
Speaker (Manual Setup)
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
X
• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
• Default settings are underlined.
Pattern1 ▶ 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with
built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp
connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
Basic
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel
plus front presence speakers) (p.18).
7.1 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 7.1 system in
the main zone (p.27).
5.1.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 5.1.2 system in
the main zone (p.28).
5.1 Bi-Amp
Select this option when you use the 5.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers)
(p.28).
7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]
Select this option when you use the 7.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers
and surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.29).
selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
En
123
■ Configuration
Surround
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
X
Settings
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
Select this option for large speakers.
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
Large
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output
Select this option for small speakers.
from the corresponding speakers.
Small
Front
None
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Large
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
X
Large x1
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large x2
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
Settings
Large
Small x1
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
None
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Small x2
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
None
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
En
124
Front Presence
Layout
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
Settings
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.66) works in this case.
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
X
Settings
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Front Presence
Use
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
X
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.22).
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
En
125
■ Level
4
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Settings
Manual
5
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
an item.
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
X
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
6
Setup” have already been saved (p.43). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
■ Test Tone
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.43) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
En
126
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
Sound
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
Configures the audio output settings.
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.
■ Lipsync
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
X
Delay Enable
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3
■ Dynamic Range
Settings
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
signals) playback.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Settings
Auto/Manual Select
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto
Setting range
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
■ Max Volume
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En
127
■ Initial Volume
■ Virtual Presence Speaker
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
Settings
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected (p.64).
Off
On
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
Settings
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Off
Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
■ Pure Direct Mode
X
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.68).
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
Settings
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Settings
X
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
contents.
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3
Settings
functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
Off
On
Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
3
Enables CINEMA DSP HD .
Disable
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable
Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to
“Enable”.
En
128
Video
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Configures the video output settings.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.144) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Aspect
Settings
Direct
Processing
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Disables the video signal processing.
Settings
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
X
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
X
video output delay.
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
(4K) signals.
displayed on the TV screen.
En
129
HDMI
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.167) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
■ HDMI Control
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.165).
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Settings
Off
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
X
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
• The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
switched to its built-in tuner.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) is set to “Main”.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT
Default
AUDIO 1
2 jack.
Y
Settings
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
En
130
Network
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
Configures the network settings.
standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby
indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.39).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.52).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.57).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
En
131
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
■ Manual network settings
■ MAC Address Filter
1
2
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
3
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
Filter
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Settings
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
X
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
AirPlay (p.92) and DMC (p.112) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
Settings
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
Off
On
value.
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.
Auto
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
En
132
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.80).
Settings
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
■ Audio Receive
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
Off
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth Standby
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Off
On
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.132) is set to “Off”.
En
133
Multi Zone
■ Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.
Configures the multi zone settings.
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.81).
Settings
Off
Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
En
134
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set
Audio Delay
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the video.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Mono
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume
adjustments for Zone2.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Settings
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
X
Enhancer
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) for Zone2 output.
Max Volume
Settings
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
X
Tone Control
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2
output.
Initial Volume
Settings
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
En
135
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Extra Bass
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Settings
Main, Zone2
Settings
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On
Enables Extra Bass.
X
For details on audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).
Zone2 - Audio Output
Balance
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output.
to “Zone2”.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
On
Enables the audio output.
Off
Disables the audio output (video output only).
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Party Mode Set
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.99).
(p.134).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
En
136
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Function
■ Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings
DSP Program
Selection
Select a sound program.
INPUT Selection
Select an input source for playback.
NET Selection
Select a network source.
Preset Selection
Select a registered item (shortcut).
■ Input Assignment
Browse Screen 1 Page Up/Down
Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Subwoofer Trim
Adjust the subwoofer volume.
■ Procedure
Dialogue Level
Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.
qRepeat / wShuffle
Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
2
Y
Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.140) is set to “On”.
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
En
137
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
Settings
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Choices
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Target Zone
switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Trigger Mode
Settings
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main
Settings
Power
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Zone2
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
All
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
En
138
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
ECO
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
En
139
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Settings
X
Off
If new firmware is available,
Disables the eco mode.
(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).
On
Enables the eco mode.
Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
140
Types of information
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
You can check the following information in the Information menu.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Audio Signal
Interface
TV interface
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
Format
Channel
Input
Output
Audio format of the input signal
■ Network
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
Displays the network information on the unit.
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
X
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Network Name
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133)
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection
■ Video Signal
Wired/Wireless
The status of the wired or wireless connection
Displays information about the current video signal.
SSID
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog)
En
141
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID
The SSID of the wireless network
Security
Security method
Security Key
Security key
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
MAC address
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection
Network Connection
“Wireless Direct” indication
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.144)
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type (p.144)
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.143)
Tuner Freq. Step
PROGRAM
3
4
5
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.144)
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the
“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.147).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2
Volume
The volume for Zone2
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network,
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
En
142
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)
X
Default settings are underlined.
Item
Function
SPEAKER IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
143
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
143
REMOTE ID
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
144
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
SPEAKER¡IMP.
8¬MIN
Page
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
connected.
Settings
144
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
144
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
144
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.
145
DTS MODE
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
145
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.
145
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
146
FIRM. UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
146
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
146
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
REMOTE SENSOR
ON
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
En
143
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF
Turns off the remote control sensor.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
TV FORMAT
NTSC
ID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Settings
ID1, ID2
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
MONITOR CHECK
YES
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.129)
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
Settings
Settings
FM100/AM10
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
En
144
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
DTS MODE
MODE 1
4K MODE
MODE 1
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
playback device are connected to the unit.
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
Settings
unit supports.
Settings
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1
MODE 2
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
MODE 1
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
MODE 2
Format
MODE 1
8 bit
RGB 4:4:4
,
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
4K/60, 50 Hz
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
10 bit
MODE 2
12 bit
8 bit
10 bit
-
-
-
-
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
12 bit
RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:0
,
,
-
RGB 4:4:4
,
,
-
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
,
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
process.
Y
Choices
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Ethernet.
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
En
145
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
VERSION
x.xx
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Choices
X
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.142) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).
En
146
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
1
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
3
PHONO
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
5
AUDIO
1
2
Note
TUNER
MAIN
BLUETOOTH
ZONE 2
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.146).
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
AV
4
1
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
“START” and press ENTER.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
VOLUME
Read the on-screen description.
The firmware update is complete.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
X
X
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
SETUP” menu (p.146).
• The firmware update indicator (p.12) on the front display lights up when a firmware
be displayed in the “System” screen (p.142). You can update the unit’s firmware by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
update is available via the network.
BAND
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
(mail icon)
appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will
Information icon
ON SCREEN is pressed.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Message
System Icon
En
147
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
z
AV
1
5
2
3
6
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
2
To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor
keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.
3
Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
The following message is displayed on the front display.
SCENE
1
Read the on-screen description.
3
4
Firmware update indicator (flashes)
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
NETWORK
UPDATE:ENTER
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
X
OPTION
The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
minutes after Step 3.
4
To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
X
• To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.
En
148
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
speaker settings again (p.43). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.123).
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
the short messages.
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.127). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.127).
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.139).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.128). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
(p.128).
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.144).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
“Option” menu (p.109).
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
En
149
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1
2
3
The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.139).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.143).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)
En
150
Problem
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.143).
Audio
Problem
No sound.
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.127).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The volume cannot be increased.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.126).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.124).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.128).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.126).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.125).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
En
151
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.
TV audio is selected as the input source.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.32).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.130).
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.130). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Noise/hum is heard.
The sound is distorted.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal
(p.96).
circuitry switching.
En
152
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.144).
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
in the “Information” menu (p.141). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.167).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO
AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.34).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.60).
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
The video is interrupted.
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due (p.96).
to internal circuitry switching.
En
153
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
(p.110).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.69).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.69).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually
(p.70).
Auto Preset has been used.
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.
Cause
Remedy
An initial scan has not been performed.
Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.72).
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.
No DAB radio sound.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.
En
154
Try the station later or select another station.
Bluetooth
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
Enable the Bluetooth function (p.133).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.80).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.80).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.80).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
155
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.131). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.131).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.
Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.85).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
En
156
Problem
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
Cause
Remedy
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
En
157
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.146).
Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied
Cause
Remedy
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.85).
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.39).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.143).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
Unable to play
Update failed.
En
158
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
Audio information (audio decoding format)
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
Dolby Atmos
DTS 96/24
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
audio quality than that used for CDs.
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
DTS Dialog Control
sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
Dolby Atmos Stream
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
DTS Digital Surround
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
Dolby Digital
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
DTS-ES
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
Dolby Digital Plus
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
recorded.
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Express
Dolby Enabled Speaker
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
Dolby Surround
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
discs).
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
DTS-HD Master Audio
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
technology.
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
Dolby TrueHD
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
BD (Blu-ray discs).
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
En
159
DTS Neo:6
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
channels of surround sound.
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
En
160
Audio Information (Others)
HDMI and video information
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
Component video signal
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
is independent.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
Composite video signal
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
transmitted with a single cable.
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Deep Color
Lip sync
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
output.
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En
161
Network information
Yamaha technologies
SSID
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
Wi-Fi
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
CINEMA DSP HD3
WPS
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
wireless home network.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En
162
Supported devices and file formats
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
recording device or consult file's help.
Supported devices
■ USB/PC (NAS)
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
File
■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
WAV *
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
16/24
-
2
,
MP3
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
WMA
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
-
2
,
ALAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96
16/24
-
2
,
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
-
2
,
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz
1
-
2
-
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
Sampling frequency
(kHz)
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
* Linear PCM format only
storage device.
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
■ AirPlay
files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of March 2017)
En
163
Video signal flow
Video conversion table
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
X
to a TV as shown below.
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
HDMI out
TV
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in
VIDEO in
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO in
480i/576i
m: Available
En
164
m
m
Information on HDMI
Multi-zone output
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
Zone 2 to the unit's output jacks.
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier
(p.30)
HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.95)
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
EXTRA SP jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*2)
m (*2)
m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m(*4)
m (*4)
Analog audio (AUDIO)
m
m
USB (*5)
m
m
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
Network sources (*5)
m
m
• Standby synchronization
TUNER
m
m
• Volume control including mute
In \ Zone2 Out
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.32) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.34).
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
m: Available
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Output: On)
(Example)
*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
Playback device
also turns off
*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV
control (p.101) or use the party mode (p.99).
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.61)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device
operation keys
En
165
(Example)
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
Y
6
Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
7
Press ON SCREEN.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
3
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2
Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN
RETURN
3
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
5
6
7
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
DISPLAY
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
En
166
Y
HDMI signal compatibility
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the TV.
the instruction manual for each device.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
effectively.
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
2
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.
En
167
Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited.
Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)
Windows™
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En
168
Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 9 (AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio
• Supported Audio Formats
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
– Dolby Atmos
HDMI
– DTS:X
– Dolby TrueHD
• HDMI Features
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
– ARC (Audio Return Channel)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX)
• Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
– 3D Video
– HDMI Control (CEC)
– Dolby Digital Plus
– Dolby Digital
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution
– DTS Express
– Auto Lip Sync
– DTS
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio
– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
– Deep Color
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
– x.v.Color
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
– HD audio playback
TUNER
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
• Analog Tuner
– HDMI Zone Output
[Australia model]
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
– VGA
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]
– 480i/60 Hz
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, BI-AMP]
– 576i/50 Hz
[Other models]
– 480p/60 Hz
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[SURROUND BACK, ZONE2]
– 576p/50 Hz
– Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
– Pre Out x 7
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R)
– Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1-2, mono)
– ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
USB
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– Headphone x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
En
169
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Bluetooth
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Sink Function
• Decoding Format
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Source Function
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 135 W/ch
Center ............................................................................... 135 W/ch
– Dolby Atmos
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 135 W/ch
– Dolby Digital
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
– DTS:X
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR
– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
• Supported Profile
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 170 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
– DTS Digital Surround
Front L/R............................................................................ 170 W/ch
Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Post Decoding Format
Center ................................................................................ 170 W/ch
• Supported Codec
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
Source Function ............................................................................SBC
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 170 W/ch
– Dolby Surround
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 170 W/ch
– Neural:X
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Front L/R............................................................................ 165 W/ch
• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
Audio Section
• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW)
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..................................................... Main, Zone2
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
Center ................................................................................ 165 W/ch
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W
Center...................................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 110 W+110 W
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
Center...................................................................................... 110 W
Network
Surround L/R............................................................... 110 W+110 W
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Center...................................................................................... 120 W
• Wi-Fi function
Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 165 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more
Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W
• Internet Radio
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
ZONE OUT.......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
Front L/R ............................................................................140 W/ch
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
Center.................................................................................140 W/ch
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
Surround L/R......................................................................140 W/ch
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Surround Back L/R.............................................................140 W/ch
– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)
En
170
PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more
• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
General
• Video Signal Level
Composite .........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................................0.04% or less
Y ......................................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 Ω)
.........................................................................................0.04% or less
Pb/Pr ...........................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
• Video Maximum Input Level .................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
.................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
• Tuning Range
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
[Korea model]..............................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].........................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2
[China model] ..............................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
• Tuning Range
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
[Brazil and General models] ....AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
FM Section
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
and Russia models)
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models only)
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced
[Asia model]................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................................................450 W
[Other models] ...........................................................................420 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................................. 435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
• Weight ....................................................................... 14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
En
171
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2017 AM-A0
YJ290A0/EN1
Download PDF

advertising